2016 Dodge Dart Owner`s Manual

2016 Dodge Dart Owner`s Manual
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Dart
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped . .13
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped . . .15
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .29
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .110
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .65
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip
in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The
keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Push Button Ignition.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
or Driver Information Display (DID) will display the
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or “Driver
Information Display (DID) as Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
push to operate the ignition switch.
compartment.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
or lock cylinders with either side up.
2
Standard Blade Ignition Key
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In
addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on
message will display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in
possible injury or damage.
a location accessible to children), and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key
CAUTION!
Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a key from the ignition and lock all doors when
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of leaving the vehicle unattended.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
General Information
SENTRY KEY
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorFrequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
or unlocked.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, an RF receiver, and either an
2. This device must accept any interference received, Ignition Node Module (IGNM) or a Keyless Push Button
including interference that may cause undesired op- Ignition to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
eration.
Therefore, only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start Replacement Keys
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
NOTE: Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
engine being shut off after two seconds.
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal the vehicle. Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to a
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
CAUTION!
as possible by an authorized dealer.
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer sysAll of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. This system may also incorporate a
General Information
ultrasonic intrusion sensor that monitors for motion in
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio the vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
2. This device must accept any interference received,
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
including interference that may cause undesired opoff after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
eration.
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved rearm itself.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
mation.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
NOTE:
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Tamper Alert
Security Alarm.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the Key Fob/Remote for at least
by the system.
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals Security System Manual Override
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
lights will turn on.
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a ILLUMINATED ENTRY
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
(24 km/h) or greater.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
NOTE:
To Use The Panic Alarm
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
NOTE:
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the system.
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitdimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
(extreme bottom position).
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
(IGNM)
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Unlock The Doors
Flash Lights With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setthe driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using The Panic Alarm
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
Sound Horn With Lock
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
and the interior lights will turn on.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
Instrument Panel” for further information.
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
horn will remain on.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
other hand.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Button Ignition Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating RKE halves may require screw removal – if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter
Case
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
shown in step #2 for removal.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opon the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
eration.
Separating Keyless Push Button Ignition Transmitter
Case
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved How To Use Remote Start
by the party responsible for compliance could void the All of the following conditions must be met before the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
engine will remote start:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Vehicle in PARK
• Doors closed
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the • Hood closed
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Trunk closed
while still maintaining security. The system has
• Hazard switch off
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Battery at an acceptable charge level
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• RKE panic button not pushed
• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may • Vehicle Security Alarm not active
reduce this range.
• Ignition in OFF position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID (if
equipped) if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The EVIC/DID message stays active until the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15-minute cycle.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
Start request.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Remote Start mode.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
in the Remote Start mode.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two push and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) or insert the key and
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before turn it to the RUN position (vehicles not equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go).
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) or
⬙Remote Start Active Key to Run⬙ (vehicles not equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go) will display in the EVIC/DID
until you push the START button or turn the key to the
RUN position.
General Information
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). indicator is visible.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
Power Door Locks
If you push the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
key from the ignition or closing the door will allow the
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in
the OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
4. The clutch pedal is not pushed when the door is
opened (manual transmission vehicles).
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically 5. Any door is opened.
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
6. The doors were not previously unlocked.
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect SetAutomatic Unlock Doors On Exit
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with further information.
power door locks if:
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- in accordance with local laws.
abled.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
3. The transmission is in PARK when the door is opened
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
(automatic transmission vehicles).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
2
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into
the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower rerotate the door lock button to the unlocked position, roll
sponse time.
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Transmitter In Vehicle
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
trunk lid, the trunk lid will automatically unlatch, unless
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitof CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
located on the deck lid.
deck lid.
To Enter The Trunk
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Trunk Unlock Button
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE:
General Information
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
transmitter battery is dead.
including interference that may cause undesired opThe vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
eration.
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
vehicle’s interior door panel.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Driver One Touch Down
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
Express Down
Push the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go down automatically.
Manual Down
Push the switch for more than a half a second and release
when you want the window to stop.
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
Express Up
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent
and release, and the window will go down automatically. Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go up automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the Manual Up
window to stop.
Lift the switch for more than a half a second and release
To stop the window from going all the way down during when you want the window to stop.
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Reset Auto-Up
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
switch again to close the window.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoadditional two seconds after the window is closed.
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
WARNING!
after the window is fully open.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
Window Lockout Switch
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
push and release the window lockout button again windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur(setting it in the UP position).
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
The trunk lid can be released from
inside the vehicle by pushing the
TRUNK RELEASE button located
on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know
button will operate.
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using
the external release switch located on the underside of
WARNING!
the decklid overhang. The release feature will function
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Trunk Emergency Release
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or beltside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
between occupants and the door and occupants could
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
be injured.
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
them or under their arm.
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Initial Indication
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermithappen far away from home or on your own street.
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and Change Of Status
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
belts are buckled again.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning and cargo is properly stowed.
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authodriver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactibelts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occuvating BeltAlert.
pants to buckle their seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
Positioning The Lap Belt
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
the latch plate.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an worn snugly and positioned properly.
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Children 12 years old and under should always be 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING! (Continued)
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
(Continued)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 2 — Supplemental Driver And Passenger Knee Air Bags/Driver
And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliAdvanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad- away from an inflating air bag.
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adof injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad- vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
collisions, including some that may produce substantial Advanced Front Air Bags.
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
severe initial deceleration.
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
located in the front passenger seat
the OCS estimates that:
• Air Bag Warning Light
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
light objects on it; or
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pasunderneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is losenger, including a child; or
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing * It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
child restraint; or
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat
Front Passenger Air
Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
Bag Output
Reduced-power
deployment
Reduced-power
deployment OR
Full-power deployment
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Reduced-power
deployment
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortoccupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
ably on or near the floor
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
seatback in an upright position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
seated weight on the front passenger seat
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instruThe front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
ment panel).
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
to face the rear of the vehicle.
that it detects.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
position.
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
improperly.
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
and center console.
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the • Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployfront passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
seat.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
(Continued)
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING! (Continued)
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
in the instrument panel The following requirements must be strictly followed:
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
components in any way.
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
service immediately.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS comaftermarket seat cover or cushion.
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage
The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip ’n Stow
Front Passenger Seat Storage (refer to “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional information). Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow Front
Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the latch
before closing the seat. In addition, after closing the Front
Passenger Seat Storage bin, make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully latched
to the base. Over-stuffing the storage bin may result in
the OCS inaccurately classifying the front passenger’s
seated weight.
WARNING!
Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow Front
Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the
latch before closing the seat. In addition, after closing
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin, make sure the
front passenger seat cushion is pushed downward
and fully latched to the base. Over-stuffing the
storage bin, or a not fully latched passenger seat
cushion, may result in misclassification of the front
passenger’s weight. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in
vehicles equipped with outboard rear seat SABs) seats.
The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the
seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
the seam on the outboard side of the seat cushion’s trim
cover (outboard rear seats — if equipped with rear SABs).
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover (front seats) and
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Front Air Bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
immediately after deployment.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inor all of the following may occur:
structions for cleaning.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deand/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricbags will not be in place to protect you.
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
authorized dealer immediately.
Procedure
Enhanced Accident Response System
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
and starting the engine.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
Air Bag Warning Light
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malstraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
with air bag system electrical components.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
WARNING!
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your proteccould cause it to fail when you need it. You could
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
system immediately.
protect you. Do not modify the components or
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
(Continued)
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
vehicle or the EDR.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
Child Restraints
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
These data can help provide a better understanding of times, including babies and children.
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a province, requires that small children ride in proper
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosthe EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- ecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner LATCH
lower anchorages?
No
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
Yes
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are 17
inches (440 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
All head restraints may be removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorage Locations
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
2
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child Always follow the directions of the child restraint manurestraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
To Install A LATCH - Compatible Child Restraint:
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
(Continued)
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
tions to attach a tether anchor.
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacmay need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
turer’s instructions.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
to allow more room for the child seat.
in any direction.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
2
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit
of the Child
Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
Yes
No
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
All head restraints may be removed.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
vehicle seat.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Anchorage
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
WARNING!
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
attach a tether anchor.
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
in any direction.
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to Transporting Pets
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
a collision.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
SAFETY TIPS
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
Vehicle
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Seat Belts
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
system.
Restraints” for further information.
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .127
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .123 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .123
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
䡵 Uconnect PHONE (Uconnect 200)
Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Uconnect Phone Features . . . . .
. . . . . . .127
. . . . . . .133
. . . . . . .135
. . . . . . .136
. . . . . . . . . . .137
. . . . . . . . . . .139
. . . . . . . . . . .146
. . . . . . . . . . .149
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Uconnect 8.4/8.4Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Uconnect Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Uconnect 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Uconnect Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment . . . . . .225
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
䡵 VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect 200) . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .227
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .238
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .247
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .249
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .251
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .268
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .274
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .275
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .279
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .283
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .284
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .295
▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear
Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
to the Front and Rear Doors.
forward, full rearward and normal.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
Lighting — If Equipped
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the drivers door tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
trim panel.
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in positionthe mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun.
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati1. Fold down the sun visor.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK (or applied PARK brake for
Manual transmission).
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the deaudible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
tection zones.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
alert during these types of zone entries.
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
NOTE:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system.
It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Modes Of Operation
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Modes Of Operation With Uconnect System — If When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
Equipped
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Customer Programalert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
mable Features — Uconnect Access settings ” in “Underwill also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and destanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side be muted.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when NOTE:
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
system, the radio volume is muted.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
the appropriate visual alert only.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
2. The device must accept any interference received,
systems.
including interference that may cause undesired opNOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
eration of the device.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
used.
authorization to use this equipment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Uconnect PHONE (Uconnect 200)
For additional information on Uconnect:
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone
using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ
“Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s
audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when
using the Uconnect Phone.
• U.S. residents - visit DriveUconnect.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver- Uconnect features Bluetooth technology - the global
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect website for sup- standard that enables different electronic devices to conported phones.
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your
For
Uconnect
phone
compatibility
visit
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
Residents – UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465-2001
the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone al(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
lows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be Voice Command Button
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
butWhen you push the Voice Command
English, Spanish, or French languages.
ton you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the
Uconnect website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
Uconnect Phone Button
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
The steering wheel controls will contain the from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
but- equipped.
two control buttons (Uconnect Phone
button) that will The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
ton and Voice Command
enable you to access the system. When you the Uconnect Phone such as “Phone” or caller ID.
button you will hear a
push the Uconnect Phone
BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a
few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
Voice Command Tree
beep.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup”, “Device Help Command
Pairing” and then “Pair a Device”, the following If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
compound command can be said: “Setup”, “Device know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
Pairing” and “Pair a Bluetooth Device”.
the beep. The Uconnect Phone will then play some of the
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the options.
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the Uconnect Phone, simply push the Phone NOTE: If other phones are present during the pairing
button and follow the audible prompts for direc- process make sure they are switched to off or the
tions. Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of bluetooth is disabled before proceeding.
button on the steering wheel.
the Phone
The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone
Cancel Command
pairing instructions:
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and • Push the Phone
button to begin.
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
few instances the system will take you back to the
“Device Pairing”.
previous menu.
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
and follow the audible prompts.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect webgiven a unique phone name.
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• You will then be asked “Should paired device be set as • The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
Favorite?” If yes this phone will become the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
Uconnect Phone. However, at any given time, only one
mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect • The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
System. The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know
of certain radios.
which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones
are in the vehicle at the same time.
Call By Saying A Name
• Start paring procedure on device. See device manual
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
for instructions.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Select Uconnect on the device and enter the four-digit
“Call.”
Personal Identification Number (PIN) displayed on
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
radio into your mobile phone.
person you want to call.
Dial By Saying A Number
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you can say “john doe” or “john doe, mobile,” where
“Dial.”
John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To • To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to
by Saying a Name” section.
“Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook,” in the
phonebook.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
• The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
start the vehicle.
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries downnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availAccess Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availwebsite for supported phones.
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded. 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone“Phonebook New Entry.”
book. However, if there is less than 10 contacts in the
3. When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use
mobile phone, the SIM contacts may also download.
of long names helps the Voice Command and it is
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
“Robert” instead of “Bob.”
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans4. When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
phone connection.
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phoneAdd Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook
book entry, if desired.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is 5. When prompted, recite the phone number for the
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
phonebook entry that you are adding.
To add names to the Uconnect phonebook using Voice After you are finished adding an entry into the phoneCommands:
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
main menu.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically
downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended “Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic down- number to a name entry that already exists in the
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say feature.
“Phonebook Edit.”
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect Phone will ask
you which designation you wish to delete: home,
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
when the vehicle is not in motion.
wish to delete.
To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
mands:
language is deleted.
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries canDelete Uconnect Phonebook Entry
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say not be deleted or edited.
“Phonebook Delete.”
List All Uconnect Phonebook Names
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
button
from the list, push the Voice Command
while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired
entry and say “Delete.”
To list all Uconnect phonebook names using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded
phonebook entries, if available.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
button during the playing of the Currently In Progress
Command
desired name, and say “Call.”
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, you will
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” have the option of Answer, Ignore, or Transfer. The cursor
will begin on Answer. Rotating the scroll knob will move
operations at this point.
between the options, pushing Enter will select the current
4. The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the
item. After accepting the call, the options on the screen
number designation you wish to call.
will be End, Transfer, Hold, and Mute. The top line will
display the contact, if the contact is not in the phonebook
5. The selected number will be dialed.
or the phonebook has not been downloaded the phone
Phone Call Features
number will be displayed on the screen. Push the Phone
The following features can be accessed through the
button to accept the call. To reject the call, push and
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your hold the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Call” in this section.
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
button to place the current call on
• Push the Phone
hold and answer the incoming call.
To put a call on hold, push the Phone
button until
you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on
hold. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
button until you hear a single beep.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call the Phone
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Toggling Between Calls
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button until you hear a single beep,
push the Phone
Progress
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
To make a second call while you are currently on a call, calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or hold at a time.
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
Call Termination
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on To end a call in progress:
hold):
button.
1. Momentarily push the Phone
button until you hear a
1. Push and hold the Phone
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If
joined into one conference call.
the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a
call on hold may not become active automatically.
Three-Way Calling
This is cell phone-dependent.
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a 2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Phone
second phone call, as described under “Making a
Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After Redial
the second call has established, push and hold the
button until you hear a double beep, indi- To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
Phone
cating that the two calls have been joined into one using Voice Command:
conference call.
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
after which the call is automatically transferred from
the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Features
Uconnect Phone.
Language Selection
Call Continuation
To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using:
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call 3. Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cancellation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
voice commands will be in that language.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration,
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: After every Uconnect Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32 name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.,
Canada, and Mexico). The number dialed may not be
applicable with the available mobile service and area.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
button
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
and say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as compared to
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
using the mobile phone directly.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency,
your mobile phone must be:
• Turned on.
• Paired to the Uconnect System.
• Have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
NOTE:
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-521-2779
for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and
1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico).
Please refer to the FCA US LLC 24-Hour “Roadside
Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and in the Owner’s Information Manual on
the DVD under “Other References.”
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
and
say
“Setup,”
followed
by
“Roadside
Assis• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
tance.”
“Roadside Assistance.”
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working With Automated Systems
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice
Command
button and say the sequence you wish to
enter, followed by the word “Send”. For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3
button
7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command
and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”, is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a number
on a pager.
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as
navigating through an automated telephone system.
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and
system or an automated service, such as a paging service call and then push the Voice Command
or automated customer service line. Some services re- say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to say the
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, “number.” If you wish to send the name say “Send
Name” followed by a valid name from the phonebook.
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
as tones over the phone.
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone 1. Push the Phone
network configurations. This is normal.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
use of this feature.
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
Phone And Network Status Indicators
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will provide
button and say, notification to inform you of your phone and network
could push the Voice Command
“Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to status when you are attempting to make a phone call
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
using Uconnect Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
mute the Uconnect Phone:
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing
button.
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Push the Voice Command
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s To un-mute the Uconnect Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same as
button.
• Push the Voice Command
if you dial the number using Voice Command.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle Advanced Phone Connectivity
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situaTransfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transprogress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone
without terminating the call.
audio.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
using Voice Command:
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
button and say “Trans1. Push the Voice Command
• The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all
fer Call.”
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
butbeing announced, push the Voice Command
ton and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
“Delete” a paired phone.
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth Select Another Mobile Phone
connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using another
Uconnect Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect Phone.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
button at any time • You can also push the Voice Command
button at
• You can also push the Phone
while the list is being played, and then choose the
any time while the list is being played, and then
phone that you wish to select.
choose the phone you wish to delete.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect
Phone will return to using the highest priority phone
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft. [9 m])
the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Uconnect Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
Phone
button and say “Uconnect Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
prompts.
• From outside the Uconnect Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode), push and hold the Voice Command
button for five seconds until the session begins,
or,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the
“Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice
Training” command.
You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System
will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
Uconnect Voice Command Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features,
button and say “Voice
push the Voice Command
Command Tutorial.”
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The For best performance:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
Reset
and the mirror.
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
button.
1. Push the Phone
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
you.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking NOTE:
during a Voice Command period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is in
Performance is maximized under:
motion is not recommended.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
• Low Road Noise.
• Smooth Road Surface.
• Fully Closed Windows.
• Dry Weather Condition.
Even though the system is designed for users speaking in
North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some. When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail,
or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit
string, make sure to say “Send.”
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar. Numbers must be spoken in single digits.
“800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.” You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect Phone
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
• Low road noise
Power-Up
• Smooth road surface
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather conditions
• Operation from the driver’s seat
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Voice Commands
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Alternate (s)
Primary
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
Alternate (s)
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
Alternate (s)
pairing
phone book
Primary
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
Alternate (s)
return or main menu
select
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Read Messages:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone and your phone is supported, • You can either say the message you wish to send or say
an announcement will be made to notify you that you have
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
a new text message. If you wish to hear the new message:
button
To send a message, push the Voice Command
• Push the Phone
button.
while the system is listing the message and say
“Send.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
• Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you.
List of Preset Messages:
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect Phone.
1. Yes
Send Messages:
2. No
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone, if your 3. Where are you?
mobile phone is supported. To send a new message:
4. I need more direction.
button.
• Push the Phone
5. L O L
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Why
19. Send number to call
7. I love you
20. Start without me
8. Call me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
9. Call me later
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
• Push the Phone
12. I am on my way
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
button.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/
on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth ON mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
General Information
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Activated Features:
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mofollowing conditions:
bile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
the party responsible for compliance could void the
SMS messages.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Smith Mobile”).
• This device must accept any interference received,
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
including interference that may cause undesired op• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
eration.
Back”).
UCONNECT PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4Nav
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
Recent Calls”).
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
Smith Mobile”).
via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
Screen Activated Features
vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone. For
Uconnect customer support, visit the following website:
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
touchscreen.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect Phone Button
button is used to
The Uconnect Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent incoming and outgoing calls, view
phonebook along with other features. When
you push the button you will hear a BEEP. The beep is
your signal to give a command.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be Uconnect Voice Command Button
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
button is
The Uconnect Voice Command
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
only used for “barge in” and when you are
Uconnect Phone.
already in a call and you want to send Tones
or make another call.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
button is also used to access 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
The Voice Command
guide you to complete the task.
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see You will be prompted for a specific command and then
the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on guided through the available options.
button.
how to use the Voice Command
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
prompt.
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
equipped.
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comOperation
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith moVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
bile.”
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
compound command form of the voice command is
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
for how Voice Command works:
say each part of the command when you are asked for
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith moit. For example, you can use the compound command
bile.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
Natural Speech
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lanwheel.
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in Voice Command Tree
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
Help Command
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
would like to.”
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase the beep.
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push NOTE:
button on your steering wheel and say a
the Phone
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your mobile
command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions
phone to complete this procedure.
button on the radio
begin with a push of the Phone
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
control head.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
website may also provide detailed instructions for pairyou will be returned to the main menu.
ing.
or Voice Command
You can also push the Phone
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen to begin.
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main 2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
or previous menu.
system, a pop-up will appear.
Cancel Command
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
• Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect
screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.
Mobile Phone Pairing
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
• If “No” is selected, press the “Settings” button from
the Uconnect Phone main screen.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the “Settings” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
precedence over other paired phones within range.
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was system, a pop-up will appear.
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
priority.
audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen
• “Show Paired Phones”
while the system is connecting.
• “Connect My Phone”
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make
1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen to begin.
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
3. Press the “Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen to
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
priority.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also use the following VR command to bring up Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
a list of paired audio devices:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• “Show Paired Phones”
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
• “Connect My Phone”
button on the touchscreen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest 4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio 5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touchscreen.
Device follow these steps:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources” Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
button on the touchscreen.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular 2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
Audio Device.
button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the 5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
list.
than the currently connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
button on the touchscreen.
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
device name.
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
The options pop-up will be displayed.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1.
2.
3.
4.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down- There are three ways you can add an entry to your
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected Favorite Phonebook.
to the Uconnect Phone.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downpress and hold a favorite button on the top of the
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phone main screen.
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phonebook from the Phone main screen, then select the
able for use.
appropriate number. Press the “+” next to the selected
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
phone is accessible.
select “Add to Favorites.”
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
record. Select an empty entry and press the “+” on that
selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
press “Add from Mobile.” You will then be asked
which contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite will
be shown.
Phonebook Favorites
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” button on
the touchscreen and then select the “+” button on the
touchscreen located to the right of the phonebook
Add From Mobile
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “+” next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
Remove From Favorites
4. The Options pop-up will display, press “Remove from
Favs.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
3
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Press the “Phonebook” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Favorites” button on the touchscreen. Scroll
to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and
Towing Assistance Favorites.
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
3. Press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
between Editing the number or resetting the number
4. Press the “+” next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
to default.
altered.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
• Mobile Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the
features that you have.
• Recent Call Log
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
• SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin,
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 151-1234-5555.
with Uconnect Phone.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Redial
• Dial by pressing in the number
1. Push the Phone
begin.
button on your steering wheel to
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated Touch-Tone Number Entry
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
button on your steering wheel
the Voice Command
while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say
“Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
These can be accessed by pressing the “recent calls”
button on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
button and say “Show
You can also push the Phone
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls
screen will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Recent Calls
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
button on the steering wheel to
Push the Phone
accept the call. You can also press the “answer” button
on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
to “Join Calls” in this section.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
button on the steering During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
mobile phone. Push the Phone
wheel, or press the “answer” button on the touch- Phone main screen.
screen, or caller ID box, to place the current call on
Toggling Between Calls
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can one call can be placed on hold at a time.
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
button to toggle beYou can also push the Phone
tween
the
active
and
held
phone
call.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold”
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Join Calls
Call Continuation
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
switched to OFF.
Call Termination
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.
To end a call in progress, momentarily push the Phone
button or press the “end” button on the touchscreen. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Uconnect Phone Features
Redial
Emergency Assistance
Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push the If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
button and after the “Listening” prompt and reachable:
Phone
the following beep, say “Redial.”
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
number for your area.
dialed from your mobile phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is • The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
mobile phone directly.
follows:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
touchscreen.
button to begin.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country 1. Push the Phone
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assisnot be applicable with the available mobile service and
tance.”
area.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC 24-Hour
“Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty
Information Booklet and in the Owner’s Information
Manual on the DVD under “Other References.”
or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touchscreen or push the Voice Command
button and
say the word “Send” then the sequence you wish to
Voice Mail Calling
enter. For example, if required to enter your PIN
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can push the
button and say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #.”
Voice Command
with Automated Systems.”
Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
Working With Automated Systems
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
This method is used in instances where one generally has automated customer service center menu structure,
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while and to leave a number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- • Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a
butPassword”, then if you push the Voice Command
numbered sequence.
ton and say “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect
Phone will then send the corresponding phone numBarge In — Overriding Prompts
ber associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over
The Voice Command
button can be used when you
the phone.
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
NOTE:
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
• The first number encountered for that contact will be asking “There are two numbers with the name John.
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be Say the full name” you could push the Voice Combutton and say, “John Smith” to select that
mand
ignored.
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone prompt.
network configurations. This is normal.
Voice Response Length
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
use of this feature.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, then phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same as
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
if you dial the number using voice a command.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
indicate your selection.
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situaPhone And Network Status Indicators
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you that the call did not go through even though the call is in
of your phone and network status when you are attempt- progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The audio.
status is given for network signal strength and phone
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
battery strength.
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing mute the Uconnect Phone simply press the “Mute”
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise button on the Phone main screen.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth mobile
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone For the best performance:
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
and the mirror.
Phone main screen.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
you.
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions • Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
a voice command period.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Condition
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth to use this
feature. If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is
not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the
“Messaging” button will be grayed out and the feature
will not be available for use.
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
Voice Text List
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Voice Text Reply
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Send Messages Using Buttons On The Touchscreen:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message:
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
3
2. Press the “messaging” button on the touchscreen then
“New Message.”
3. Press one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to.
Preset Message List
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pushing the Voice Command
button and saying the message you want to send.
Preset Message List
After the system confirms that you want to send your
List of Preset Messages:
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
4. I can’t talk right now.
17. I’m lost.
5. Call me.
18. See you later.
6. I’ll call you later.
Bluetooth Communication Link
7. I’m on my way.
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth ON mode.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name
which phone number you want to send a message to
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
for John Smith.
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
NOTE:
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
or call log download over Bluetooth then these commands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that
number supported by your Mobile phone.
have been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands
such as “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assis5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
tance” will call the corresponding number stored with
pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button on the
those contacts.
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE:
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth then these com2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
mands will return a response that the contact does not
“Other.”
exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect 200)
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Voice Command System Operation
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Systhe party responsible for compliance could void the tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
voice level.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWARNING!
eration.
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
(Continued)
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you will
When you push the Voice Command
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a comthe active application.
mand.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
To interrupt the system while it lists options, push the set to low.
button, listen for the beep, and say
Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the sysTo hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Comtem is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Commands
Main Menu
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
Changing The Volume
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth Streammand system is speaking. Please note the volume
ing mode)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Disc Mode
Bluetooth Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you Memo Mode
may say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
butrecording, you may push the Voice Command
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
Name, Track Name, etc.)
the following commands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
– “Save” (to save the memo)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
following:
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Switch to system setup”
During the playback you may push the Voice Com- • “Main menu setup”
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Switch to setup”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Voice Training
VOICE COMMAND
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Uconnect 8.4/8.4 Nav
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
button, say “System
1. Push the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
radio, disc player, USB/iPod and SiriusXM
Travel Link.
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
the system and will improve recognition.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
Uconnect Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
session should be completed when the vehicle is commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the or a raised voice level.
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
WARNING!
last trained voice only.
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
(Continued)
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Pushing the Uconnect Voice Command
button while
the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
say a command. This will become helpful once you start
to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
but- “Help.”
When you push the Uconnect Voice Command
ton, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give
These commands are universal and can be used from any
a command.
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two the active application.
responses:
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
• I didn’t understand
a normal speaking volume.
• I didn’t get that, etc.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf a command is not spoken a second time, the system dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
will respond with an error and give some direction as set to low.
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
session will end.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To hear available commands, push the Uconnect Voice 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Combutton and say “Help.” You will hear
Command
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
available commands for the screen displayed.
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
Uconnect Voice Commands
system.
The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pushing the Uconnect Voice Com- NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
button.
mand
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice
button.
Command
Changing The Volume
Source
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
mode or screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE:
• You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
• You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
• You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
• You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
• VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
• You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
connected device.
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
• You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
NOTE:
• Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
• You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
• You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
• You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
NOTE:
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
NOTE:
• Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
• You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
• Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
NOTE:
• You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Recently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
• You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,”
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,”
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
Front Seat Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. On models that are equipped with remote start, the
once to turn the HI heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
• Press the heated seat button
remote start.
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s
head and the RHR.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
Front Head Restraint
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head 1 — Release Button
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and 2 — Adjustment Button
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
two positions, UP and DOWN. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center seat
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback needs to be folded forward to fully
remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint,
put the head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
3
Rear Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: The upper seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3
Rear Seatback Loops
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the Two latches must be released to open the hood.
seatback above the seat strap.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety 3. Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release it from the
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
stowage retainer.
center front edge of the hood.
3
Hood Prop Rod
Hood Safety Latch
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Place the hood prop rod in the hood slot to secure the
hood in the open position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Prop Rod Slot
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
3
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic information.
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
Headlight Time Delay
position.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
will come on in the automatic mode.
vehicle in an unlit area.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Automatic Headlights Only)
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the Equipped
delay.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
turn off in the normal manner.
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
NOTE:
specific light and automatically switches from high
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this of view.
feature.
NOTE:
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Unturned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrumation.
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv- To Deactivate
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highin vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
operation of low beams).
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
ignition off.
system.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
dealer.
ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights are
To Activate
off and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch
must be used for normal nighttime driving.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds the
feature will deactivate.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the lens.
three times then automatically turn off.
To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. The Battery Protection also includes the glove box
light and the trunk light. To restore interior light operation after automatic battery protection is enabled (Lights
OFF), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position
or cycle the light switch.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
3
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Dome Light Position
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument
bezel ambient lighting (if equipped), of the door handle
lights and of the door map pocket lights.
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and
radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Intermittent Wiper System
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
the intermittent interval previously selected.
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
and then turn off.
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensiapproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infeature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
formation.
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
NOTE:
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the automatic transmission gear selector is in
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
165 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
ment Panel” for further information.
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
WARNING!
(40 km/h).
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
right side of the steering wheel.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
(Continued)
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the above 20 mph (32 km/h).
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inMetric Speed (km/h)
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underthe button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph To Decrease Speed
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can debutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
To Accelerate For Passing
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
U.S. Speed (mph)
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
vehicle set speed.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
the new set speed will be established.
moderate hills is normal.
Metric Speed (km/h)
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Control.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79
inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID) Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
ParkSense Ready
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
ParkSense Off
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
3
One-Half Second Tone
Slow Tone
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
3
Fast Tone
Fast Tone
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Continuous Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
Arc —
Left
Rear
Arc —
Center
Rear
Arc —
Right
Rear
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120 cm) (120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less
than
12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast
None
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
None
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st
Flashing
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
2nd Flashing
1st
Flashing
None
None
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st
Flashing
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
When the ParkSense button is pushed to disable the
system, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)
” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to REIf “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID will display
SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
vehicle is in REVERSE.
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
3
ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Off Rear Sensors
ParkSense Unavailable Service Required
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system will be automatiappears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
cally disabled when there are faulted conditions outside
of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system that inhibit the
feature from functioning properly. The Driver Information Display (DID) will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙PARKSENSE
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SYSTEM DISABLED⬙ message. If “PARKSENSE SYSTEM Cleaning The ParkSense System
DISABLED” appears in the DID, cycle the ignition. If the Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
message appears again, see an authorized dealer.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
ParkSense System Disabled
• When you turn ParkSense off, the DID will display
“PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again,
even if you cycle the ignition key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the DID will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
DID.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear Fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen the width of the vehicle.
appears again.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has proIf your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay grammable modes of operation that may be selected
feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Setdisplayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex- Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
the vehicle.
position.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pushing the lens.
Opener (HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pushed.
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Sunglass Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ- Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
ent HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is before you begin programming.
located above the center button.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
transmitter button.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indirelease the button.
cator light. HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programthen rapidly after HomeLink has received the freming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
steps.
both buttons after the indicator light changes from
slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
• To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non
— Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to NOTE:
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programprogram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
in view.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPush the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will stop the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuaTo close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Pinch Protect Feature
Venting Sunroof — Express
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Sunshade Operation
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Pinch Protect Override
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing open.
the sunroof, attempt to remove the obstruction and then
Wind Buffeting
push and hold the switch forward until the sunroof fully
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
closes.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
pushed.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- 3. Press and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit
the hard stop and move to the Vent position after 10
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
seconds.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
4. Release the Close switch, then press and hold the
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Close switch again within 5 seconds to begin the
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
teaching process. The sunroof will complete one full
cycle and return to the Fully Closed position.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the
the glass panel.
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
starting from the first step.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a relearn 5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof when
reset and ready to use.
the “Auto Up” feature stops working. To reset the
sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
The 12 Volt (13 Amp) instrument panel power outlet is
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position. located on the lower instrument panel, below the climate
controls. The power outlet has power available when the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. The NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob
power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar and element must be used.
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Instrument Panel Outlet
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located in the center
console. This power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position
(if equipped).
Underhood Fuses (Power Outlet Fuses)
1 — F84 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter
2 — F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet
Center Console Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
of the armrest between the front seats.
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
3
Rear Seat Cupholders
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
Opened Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
center console forward of the gear selector.
Console Features
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest. If equipped, the 12 Volt power outlet,
USB and Aux jack are located here.
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Rear Door Trim Storage
Front Door Trim Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
CARGO AREA FEATURES
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage Equipped
compartment.
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
Rear Armrest Storage
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seatback Loops
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
Ski Pass-Through
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation, push
the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .333
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE (EVIC) . . . . .305
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
ANALOG (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
DIGITAL (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .311
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Two Button EVIC — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID . . . . . . .346
▫ Four Button DID — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
䡵 Uconnect 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .380
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD
And MP3 Audio Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .391
▫ Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus
(USB) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
䡵 CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ CD Player Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .394
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Controlling The iPod Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .400
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .401
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .403
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Uconnect 8.4 Climate Controls —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .415
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Demister
2 — Outlet
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Radio/Uconnect System
5 — Glove Compartment
6 — Climate Control Hard Controls/
Uconnect System Hard Controls
7 — Power Outlet
8 — Ignition Switch
9 — Trunk Release
10 — Hood Release
11 — Dimmer Control
12 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE (EVIC)
4
Base EVIC Instrument Cluster — If Equipped
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
3. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
4. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ANALOG (DID)
DID Premium Analog Cluster — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
1. Tachometer
3. Fuel Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
(RPM x 1000).
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
2. Analog Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM DIGITAL (DID)
DID Premium Digital Cluster — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
1. Tachometer
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
(RPM x 1000).
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
2. Digital Speedometer
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
• Indicates vehicle speed.
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
3. Fuel Gauge
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4
minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do
In Emergencies.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely
and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to
ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction modes is set to
Sport, Track or Full OFF.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for low tire pressure telltale.
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow
Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn
signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when
the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. Examples of this message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal
Lamp Out⬙ and ⬙Low Tire Pressure.⬙
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Unstored Messages
instrument cluster.
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
The main display area will normally display the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙ is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn• Unstored Messages Until RUN
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
into several categories:
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
• Five Second Stored Messages
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of ⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Open⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
message takes control of the main display area for five Pedal and Push Button to Start.⬙
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Five Second Unstored Messages
• Current Fuel Economy
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of • Stored Messages
message takes control of the main display area for five
• Oil Life
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is ⬙Automatic High Beams • Settings
On.⬙
Two Button EVIC — If Equipped
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Odometer
• Digital Vehicle Speed
• Trip
• Range To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menus (Odometer,
Digital Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Range To
Empty, Average Fuel Economy, Current Fuel
Economy, Stored Messages, Settings).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the submenu screens of a main menu
item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Two–Button EVIC
Controls)
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
• Key Fob Battery Low
• Wrong Key Fob
• Key Fob Damaged
• Key In Ignition
• Left Turn Signal Out
• Right Turn Signal Out
• Turn Signal On
• Lights On
• Low Beam Headlight Out
• High Beam Headlight Out
• License Plate Light Out
• Backup Light Out
• Brake Light Out
• Parking Light Out
• Service Air Bag System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Washer Fluid Low
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Fuel Low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Too Cold Plug In Heater
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
• Transmission Too Hot
• Cruise Ready
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Oil Temperature Hot
• Cruise Set To XXX km/h
• Check Fuel Cap
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Oil Change Due
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Inflate Tire to XX
• Door Open
• Coolant Low
• Doors Open
• Rain Sensor Fail
• Trunk Open
• Traction Control Off
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Engine Warming Wait To Start
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Start Active Key To Run
• Trip
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Range To Empty
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Average Fuel Economy
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Current Fuel Economy
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Stored Messages
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Oil Life
EVIC Main Menu
• Settings
To navigate through the main menu features push and
arrow button once for each menu
release the UP
item. A step from the last item in the list will cause the
first item in the feature list to be displayed. The
following features are in the main menu:
• Units
• Odometer
• Digital Vehicle Speed
• Language
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average Fuel Economy), the EVIC prompts a reset with a
RIGHT
arrow button graphic and the word RESET
next to it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Trip Info
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
Push and release the UP
arrow button until the Trip
Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release Trip B
arrow button to display the following
the RIGHT
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
three trip features in the next screen:
last reset.
• Trip A
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the
• Trip B
last reset.
• Elapsed Time
Elapsed Time
arrow button to cycle through all the Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Push the UP
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
Trip Computer functions.
ON/RUN position.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Resetting A Trip Info Function
To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
function you want to reset using the UP button. Push the
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the RIGHT arrow button until the feature display zero.
last reset.
Trip A
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Range To Empty (RTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. RTE cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. When Average Fuel Economy (Average MPG
or Average L/100km) is selected, The word “RESET>”
arrow) appears next to it. Pushing the
(with RIGHT
arrow button will reset Average Fuel
RIGHT
Economy which displays “0” immediately after reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
Then, the history information will be erased, and the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
averaging will continue from the last fuel average
the vehicle, regardless of the RTE display value.
reading before the reset.
When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
Current Fuel Economy
estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.” This display will This feature shows the Current Fuel Economy in MPG or
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a L/100km. MPG meter fills from left as fuel economy
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the increases. L/100km meter fills from the right as fuel
economy increases. Gauge values will change according
LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display.
to the user specified units.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Tire Pressure
Oil Life
arrow button until ⬙Tire This feature shows oil life percentage. Holding the
arrow button will reset the Oil Life to 100%.
RIGHT
At 5% Oil Life, a ”Change Oil Message” will display
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
for 5 seconds. At 0% Oil Life, an “ Oil Change
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle graphic is Required” message will display.
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or
Stored Messages
the graphic.
Push and release the UP
Pressure⬙ is displayed.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, Inflate Tire To
XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire
pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Tire
pressure values that are too low will be flashing.
When a stored warning message is present, this
icon is displayed in the lower left side of the
Tire Pressure menu. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
arrow button will allow you to see what
• If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Service the RIGHT
TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire Pressure is an informa- the stored messages are.
tion only function and cannot be reset.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Examples Of Some Stored Messages
Oil Change Indicator
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
Service Electronic Throttle Control
display in the EVIC display for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
Washer Fluid Low
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
Settings — EVIC Units And Language Selection
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
Average and Current Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty
dependent upon your personal driving style.
and Tire Pressure features. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and • Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
⬙METRIC.⬙
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position
Push and release the UP
arrow button until the
if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the
Language is displayed, then push and release the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
arrow button to select English, Francais, or
RIGHT
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
Espanol depending on availability.
following procedure.
Fuel Low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Using The EVIC Menu
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
• Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
2. Push the accelerator pedal fully, slowly, three times
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Push the accelerator pedal fully, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
arrow button to scroll
• Push and release the UP
upward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info”.
• Push and release the RIGHT
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
arrow button to
• Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to reset Oil Life to 100%.
• Push and release the UP
EVIC screen.
arrow button to exit the
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID
• Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do The DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) features
an interactive display that is located in the instrument
not start the engine).
cluster.
arrow button to scroll
• Push and release the UP
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
Info”.
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
• Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnaccess the ”Oil Life” screen.
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
• Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one into several categories:
second to reset Oil Life to 100%.
• Five Second Stored Messages
• Push and release the UP
EVIC screen.
arrow button to exit the When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙ message type is ⬙Automatic High Beams On.⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure.⬙
Four Button DID — If Equipped
• Unstored Messages
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the information by pushing the switches mounted on the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples steering wheel. The DID consists of the following main
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal menu items:
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). • Speedometer (Analog or Digital) (km/h or MPH)
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
• Vehicle Info
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
• Fuel Economy
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are • Trip A
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Open⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
• Trip B
Pedal and Push Button to Start.⬙
• Audio
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes- • Stored Messages
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds • Screen Setup
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Information Display DID Cluster
DID Steering Wheel Buttons (Four–Button DID
Controls)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering • UP Arrow Button
wheel:
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
NOTE: Engine must be running to navigate through the
DID menu items.
upward through the main menu and submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stored
Messages, Screen Set Up).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• DOWN Arrow Button
DID Displays
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
scroll downward through the main menu and cluster and consists of the follow sections:
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item. Push and hold
the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu 1 — Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
item.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2 — Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will DID Messages
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and white
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
for on demand information.
3 — Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to •
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
•
4 — Menu Titles / Odometer
•
5 — Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
•
6 — Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
•
7 — Reconfigurable Telltales
•
9 — Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
•
sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus
•
is shown here.
Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
Service Airbag System
Traction Control Off
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
Fuel Low
Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• Cruise Off
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Ready
• Turn Signal On
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
• Brake Fluid Low
•
• Service Electronic Braking System
•
• Engine Temperature Hot
•
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
•
• Lights On
•
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
•
Key In Ignition
Key In Ignition Lights On
Remote Start Active Key to Run
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted Door Open
Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Service Airbag System
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Transmission
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Service Shifter
• Door Open
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Doors Open
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
• Trunk Open
• Washer Fluid Low
• Gear Not Available
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Analog Or Digital Speedometer Selection
Vehicle Speed MPH / km/h
Full Speedometer Analog Icon
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Vehicle Speed icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push the RIGHT
arrow button to view a digital display of
Full Speedometer Digital Icon
the current speed in MPH or km/h. Pushing the
arrow button a second time will toggle the
RIGHT
unit of measure between MPH or km/h. Push the
or DOWN
arrow button
Push and release the UP
arrow button to return to the main menu.
LEFT
until the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted
arrow NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT
button to change the display between analog and Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
DID.
digital.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arPush and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is
row button until the Fuel Economy icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
arrow button to scroll through
arrow buthighlighted. Push the RIGHT
RIGHT
the following information sub-menus using the UP
ton and the next screen will display the
and DOWN
arrow buttons:
following:
Vehicle Info Sub Menus
• Average Fuel Economy
or DOWN
arrow button • Range To Empty (RTE)
Push and release the UP
until ⬙Tire Pressure⬙ is highlighted in the DID. Push
• Current Fuel Economy
arrow button and one of
and release the RIGHT
the following will be displayed:
• Tire Pressure
• Coolant Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Life
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
4
Fuel Economy Analog Display
Fuel Economy Digital Display
The DID has the capability of displaying an interactive
flower through the Fuel Economy sub-menu which will
add one flower petal for every 2.5 Miles Per Gallon
(MPG) (1.06 km per liter (km/l) increment. Once the
vehicle reached 30 MPG the DID will display a full
flower.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy MPG Flower Analog Display
Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Trip B
Trip A
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Trip A icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. The Trip A information will display the following:
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Trip B icon/title is
highlighted in the DID. The Trip B information will display the following:
• Distance MI or km/h
• Distance MI or km/h
• Average. MPG or L/100km
• Average. MPG or L/100 km
• Elapsed Time
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT
information.
Push the DOWN
arrow button to reset all the Hold the RIGHT
information.
arrow button to enter Trip B.
arrow button to reset all the
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button until the Messages display icon is
highlighted in the DID. This feature shows
the number of stored warning messages.
arrow button will allow you to
Pushing the RIGHT
see what the stored messages are. Push the LEFT
arrow button to return to the Main Menu.
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in
arrow butthe DID. Push and release the RIGHT
ton to enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change the location that
information is displayed within the instrument cluster.
and DOWN
arrow buttons to highUse the UP
Screen Setup
light a screen setup location (i.e., Upper Left, Upper
arrow button to
Right, etc.) then push the RIGHT
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arselect the location and make changes. Push the UP
row button until the Screen Setup display
and DOWN
arrow buttons to select the inforicon is highlighted in the DID. Push and
mation you would like to display in that location (i.e.,
arrow button to enter
release the RIGHT
Date, Time, Outside Temp, etc.) and push the RIGHT
the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
arrow button to save the display setting. You can
arrow button at any time to back
push the LEFT
out of a sub-menu selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
NOTE: The Screen Setup items are only available at
speeds less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). All other menu items
are not active when in Screen Setup. If the vehicle is
shifted into gear, this feature is locked out and the main
screen will display “Screen Setup Unavailable While In
Motion”.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp (default setting)
Time
• Speedometer
Analog 1
Range To Empty (RTE)
Analog 2
Current MPG
Digital 1 (default setting)
Trip A
Digital 2
Trip B
• Gear Display
Standard (PRND –/+) (default setting)
Single Character (D)
Word (Drive)
Average MPG
• Upper Right
None
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Time
Outside Temp
Range To Empty (RTE)
Time
Average MPG
• Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Current MPG
Trip A
Trip B
• Lower Left
None (default setting)
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
• Lower Right
None (default setting)
Compass
Cancel
Okay
Oil Change Indicator
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the DID display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
• Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position
if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Using The DID Menu
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the • Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
or DOWN
arrow
• Push and release the UP
within 10 seconds.
button to scroll through the main menu to “Vehicle
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Info.”
• Push and release the RIGHT
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
arrow button to
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
arrow button for one • Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow
• Push and hold the RIGHT
second to reset the gauge and numeric display to
button to exit the DID screen.
100% for ”Oil Life.”
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
• Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
button to exit the DID screen.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
CYBERSECURITY
• Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
not start the engine).
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
or DOWN
arrow networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor• Push and release the UP
button to scroll through the main menu to “Vehicle mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Info.”
• Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features
to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle soft• Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one ware technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US
second to reset the gauge and numeric display to LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appro100% for ”Oil Life.”
priate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
devices, your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your systems or to
reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Buttons On The Touchscreen
Your Vehicle”.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect Touchscreen.
Uconnect SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate that allows
you to access and change the customer programmable
features.
CAUTION!
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can
result in damage to the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
System 8.4 Settings
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons
on the touchscreens on the right side of the screen will
allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
Press the More button on the touchscreen, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Re- Display
mote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings,
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
following settings will be available.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a • Display Mode
time.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- display settings. To change Mode status, press and rescreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired lease the Day, Night or Auto button on the touchscreen.
mode press and release the preferred setting until a Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display • Set Language
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
When in this display, you may select one of three
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
even though the headlights are on.
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
the Set Language button on the touchscreen and then
press the desired language button on the touchscreen
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
until a check-mark appears next to the language, showthe headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
ing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
menu.
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
• Units
touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
• Voice Response Length
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a press screen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the Touchscreen Beep
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting press the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
• Set Time Hours
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
unchecked. To make your selection press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or Safety & Driving Assistance
down.
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch• Set Time Minutes
screen the following settings will be available.
• Time Format
• Park Assist — If Equipped
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
Assist status, press and release the OFF, Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then press the back arrow
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
for system function and operating information.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature in the BSM not operating to specification.
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
• ParkView Backup Camera
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti- top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime button on the touchscreen. the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, press the ParkView Backup Camera button on
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the • Interior Accent Lighting
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
When this feature is selected, the interior accent lighting
previous menu.
surrounding the instrument panel will illuminate. To
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
make your selection, press the Interior Accent Lighting
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, the system will automatinext to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the Rain
to the previous menu.
Sensing button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been • Headlight Off Delay
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
to return to the previous menu.
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
Lights
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
touchscreen, and choose either “0 sec,” “30 sec,” “60 sec”
following settings will be available.
or “90 seconds.” A check-mark appears next to setting
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
previous menu.
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) • Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the make your selection, press the Auto High Beams button
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
previous menu. Refer to “Lights/Automatic High Beam
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apHeadlamp Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make • Daytime Running Lights
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Auto Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Unlock On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a
• Flash Lights With Lock
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Press the arrow back button on the
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be • Auto Unlock On Exit
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lamps
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
with Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
opened. To make your selection, press the Auto Unlock
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
On Exit button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
to return to the previous menu.
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchDoors & Locks
screen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
• Flash Lights With Lock
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
press the Flash Lights With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Remote Start button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed pressing the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Interior Motion Detection Alarm — If Equipped
This feature will sound the vehicles alarm when motion
is detected inside the vehicle while locked. To make your
selection, press the Interior Motion Detection Alarm
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the available.
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• Horn With Remote Start
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Remote Start button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
Vehicle Start — If Equipped
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,⬙
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the touchscreen.
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your • Headlight Off Delay
selection, press the Auto Heated Seats button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
menu.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch- NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
screen to select your desired time interval.
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
Compass Settings — If Equipped
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
After pressing the Compass Settings button on the touch- compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
screen the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
Compass Variance
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
• Perform Compass Calibration
• Equalizer
Press the Calibration button on the touchscreen to change
this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the
vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You
may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON button
on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree
turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects)
until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off.
The compass will now function normally.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
Audio
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
following settings will be available.
press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen. Then
• Balance/Fade
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Music Info Cleanup
Phone/Bluetooth
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, press the
Music Info Cleanup button on the touchscreen, select On
or Off followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. • Paired Audio Sources
To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button
on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to reAfter pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” button on the touchsubscribe.
screen the following settings will be available.
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to
• Channel Skip
access the Subscription Information screen.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the the screen or visit the provider online.
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
SiriusXM Setup
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM
RADIO
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
control knob to turn on the
Push the ON/VOLUME
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME
control knob a
second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Uconnect 200
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side ENTER/
BROWSE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Push the SEEK buttons
to search for the next
will highlight.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right
switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until
SCROLL control knob.
you make another selection. Holding either button
5. To exit, push the TIME button or push the BACK
will bypass stations without stopping until you release
button to return to the previous menu.
it.
The clock can also be set by pushing the MENU button.
TIME Button
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, push the
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and MENU button until CLOCK appears in the display.
radio frequency.
Using the ENTER/BROWSE button select SET TIME,
and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.
Clock Setting Procedure
SEEK Buttons
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours are
highlighted.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
NOTE: Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR.
Selecting one of these options will change the way the
clock is displayed.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Setting The Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance Or
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call Fade
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text To set the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). settings push the AUDIO button to access the Audio
sub-menu.
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons The Audio sub-menu can also be reached by pressing the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display. Push
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either the ENTER/BROWSE button to select the AUDIO menu
and use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight select
AM or FM frequencies.
Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade. Once the
TUNE Control
desired selection is highlighted, push the ENTER/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE/
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. SCROLL knob to adjust the setting.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a second time and Push the BACK button to exit Bass, Mid Range, Treble,
MID RANGE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Balance or Fade.
control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
MENU Button
decrease the mid-range tones.
pushing the MENU button allows you to scroll between
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a third time and the setting sub-menus. Once the desired sub-menu setTREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control ting is highlighted push the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to de- select the setting. The following items are selectable:
crease the treble tones.
Radio Mode
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL con- • Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade,
trol knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
just like pushing the Audio hard control. If the BACK
sound level from the Left or Right side speakers.
button is pushed the radio will return to the Main Menu.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a fifth time and FADE
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob • Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the clock.
Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level
knob. After adjusting the hours, push the ENTER/
between the front and rear speakers.
BROWSE button to set the minutes. The minutes will
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right side
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the ENTER/
BROWSE button to save time change.
Player Mode
repeat is turned Off. Repeat will be turned off once one
for the following conditions are met: 1) The source is
ejected 2) A different track list within that source is
initiated 3) The REPEAT button is toggled OFF. This
will only appear in the menu if the device currently
playing can support these features.
• Player Browse — Selecting Player Browse will go to
the appropriate browse menu depending on the device
• Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you
currently playing (will function the same as pushing
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade,
the browse button while in that mode). This will only
just like pushing the Audio hard control. If the BACK
appear in the menu if the device currently playing can
button is pushed the radio will return to the Main
support these features.
Menu.
• Shuffle (SHFL) — This function shuffles (randomizes
• Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the
the order of the files). This will only appear in the
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL
menu if the device currently playing can support these
control knob. After adjusting the hours, push the
features.
ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The min• Repeat (RPT) — When Repeat is activated, the curutes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right
rently playing song will begin again when it ends. It
side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the ENTER/
BROWSE button to save time change.
will continue to cycle through the same song until
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
You may add a second or third station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception:
• Selecting System Info will display the software verPush the A–B–C button to select the A, B or C mode. Each
sion, serial number and SIRIUS ID.
button can be set for up to 3 stations in AM, FM and Sat.
This allows a total of 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations
RADIO Button
to be stored into pushbutton memory.
Push the button to select either AM, FM and Satellite
mode if equipped.
Player Button
System Info
Pushing the Player button will allow you to switch from
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you AM/FM modes to Player mode (CD, USB, AUX,
commit to pushbutton memory AM (A, B, C), FM (A, B, Bluetooth).
C) and Satellite — 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
To Set The Pushbutton Memory
Buttons 1 - 5
When you are receiving a station that you wish to NOTE:
commit to pushbutton memory, push and hold the but- • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
ton (1–5) you wish to lock onto this station for three
position to operate the radio.
seconds.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must
be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
SEEK Button
Shuffle (SHFL) And Repeat (RPT)
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Push the MENU button to display the Player menu. Use
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle or
Repeat sub-menu. Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub-menu
setting is highlighted push the ENTER/BROWSE button
to select the setting and turn it on or off.
Shuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time. If
Push this button to change the display from a large CD one is selected while the other is currently active the
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. currently active one will be changed to OFF. These
settings will be dependent of the current source. If shuffle
RW/FF
is on in iPod, moving to CD will not have shuffle On
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will unless it was previously set to On.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button selected track.
works in a similar manner.
TIME Button
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
file recording media and formats are limited. When
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
Supported Media (Disc Types)
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA and CDDA+MP3.
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this disThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
play.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio. use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal VBR bit rates.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
MPEG
Sampling FreDiscs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification
quency (kHz)
writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
MPEG-1 Audio
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
in longer disc loading times.
Layer 3
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
Supported MP3 File Formats
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
56, 48, 40, 32,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
24, 16, 8
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
supported by the radios.
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play)
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
Pushing the Enter/Browse button will bring up a list of
by the following:
all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. SeCD-R media
lecting a folder by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
to load than non-multisession discs
playable files).
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
increase with more files and folders
Playback Of MP3 Files
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)
Pushing the PLAYER button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File NOTE:
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
• The head unit will have no control of the AUX device.
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
You can only control the volume on the head unit. No
time⬙ priority mode.
information about the song will be displayed.
Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more • The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s
and the radio will display song titles for each file.
volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
down and radio volume up.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the USB connected does not have any audio files and
the user selects USB as the device to play audio the screen
will display, “No audio files found.” This messaged is to
The USB audio input allows the user to plug in a flash
be displayed for all devices that do not have audio files
drive and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify
when connected and selected.
the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the PLAYER button will change the mode to Security
Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus
(USB) — If Equipped
USB or when an external USB drive is connected.
If this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have a
Pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button while in USB matching Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an Secumode will bring up a list of available categories within rity code will need to be entered by the dealer.
the USB. The categories will consist of: Playlists, Artist,
Album, Genre, Audiobooks, Podcasts and all Songs.
Browsing through the categories will function the same
as iPod browse. USB will not have folder browsing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED
The single disc CD player is located in the center console.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
before the CD player will operate.
4
• The CD Player is part of the radio for the Uconnect 200.
CD Player
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player Operating Instructions
Uconnect — If Equipped
Loading
If equipped with Uconnect 8.4, refer to the Uconnect 8.4
manual for further information.
To insert disc into the player, follow the instructions
shown:
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect VOICE
1. Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
the vehicle while the light below the loading slot is This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
illuminated. The disc will automatically be pulled into plugged into the USB port.
the CD player.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
2. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
light below the loading slot will turn off.
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the CD player, push the EJT button If equipped with Uconnect 8.4, refer to the Uconnect
and the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc User’s Manual for further details on iPod, USB, and MP3
usage.
within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.
4
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port Cable Routing
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
iPod or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB
port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
etc.) information on the radio display.
the vehicle’s iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
pressing radio switches, as described below.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the iPod/USB/MP3 control mode and access a
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or push the
VR
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or push the
button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
VR
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
When switched to iPod/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pushing and
holding the FF>> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB • A single push backward << RW or forward FF>> will
device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the next
or previous track.
• Use the << SEEK button during play mode to jump to
the start of the current track. Pushing the SEEK>>
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button during play mode will jump to the next track in
button and say ⬙Next or
the list, or push the VR
Previous Track.⬙
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to
the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens
have been viewed, the last INFO button push will go
back to the play mode screen on the radio.
with Voice Commands, push the VR
button, wait
for the beep, and say “Shuffle On” or “Shuffle Off.”
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up Browse mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
In Browse mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the external USB
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio device.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or • Preset 1 – Playlists
push the VR
⬙Repeat Off.⬙
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Push the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on the • Preset 3 – Albums
USB/iPod device in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace. To stop Shuffle Mode, push • Preset 4 – Genres
the SHUFFLE button again. To turn SHUFFLE On/Off • Preset 5 – Audiobooks
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
• Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
• To exit Browse mode without making a selection, push
the same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• Browse button: The Browse button will display the
top level menu of the iPod or external USB device.
Push and then turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and push the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device,
then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in
that list. Not all iPod or external USB device sub-menu
levels are available on this system.
• A-B-C button: For all player devices, pushing the
A-B-C button while browsing will present an ABC
jump feature. The system will show the available first
letters of the item being browsed. If letters do not have
items they will not be shown, “_” will be shown in
their place. After selecting a letter you will be taken to
the first item of that letter within the entire list. When
a browse subcategory is selected and contains no
contents, “No items found” will be displayed on the
screen. This message times out after three seconds, and
will take you back to the submenu you were previously in.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
(Continued)
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Placing items on the iPod or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
button and say “Bluetooth
radio or push the VR
Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect phone system, but just one can be selected and
played.
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Selecting A Different Audio Device
Uconnect phone system.
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
information on Bluetooth connectivity.
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
phone system to list the audio devices.
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
Next Track
access the switches.
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR
button on
the radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next
music track on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR
button
on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker The button located in the center of the left-hand control
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/HDD/AUX, etc.).
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
control is different depending on which mode you are in. seconds after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect 8.4 system
display if equipped.
When the Uconnect 8.4 system is in different modes
(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of
the display.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If
Equipped
Manual Climate Control Buttons
1. Blower Control
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (OFF) position. There are seven blower speeds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
2. Recirculation Control
Pushing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will
cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
• Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If
the Recirculation button is pushed while in this
mode, the LED indicator will flash several times then
go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
is this mode is selected.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
3. Temperature Control
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pushed and the
mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ECONOMY MODE
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
Then, move the temperature control to the desired
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
temperature and select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
modes.
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
5. Mode Control (Air Direction)
4. Air Conditioning Control
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light distribution. You can select either a primary mode as
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a
scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive
from that mode.
into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
• Panel
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
Air is directed through the outlets in the
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad• MAX A/C
justed to direct airflow.
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demist outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Front Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
small amount flowing through the defrost and Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehuside window demist outlets.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation, push the button a second
time.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pushing the rear window defroster switch a
second time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Uconnect 8.4 Climate Controls — If Equipped
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect 8.4 system screen.
Uconnect 8.4 screen, in the center of the instrument panel.
Buttons On The Faceplate
4
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On
The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- this function will cause the ATC to switch between
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into Operation” for more information.
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. 5. Front Defrost Button
1. MAX A/C Button
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator
will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
10. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
buttons on the touchscreens as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
9. SYNC
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the counter-clockwise.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize Button On The Touchscreen
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
time.
NOTE:
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Provides the driver with independent temperature conselect Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
time.
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
Climate Control Functions
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
A/C (Air Conditioning)
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator MAX A/C
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforcool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into mance.
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
when MAX A/C is ON.
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
Recirculation
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
Automatic Operation
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is 1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic TemperaRecirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasunits by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
section of the manual.
automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
system to function automatically.
Manual Operation Override
NOTE:
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation conThe system automatically adjusts the temperature, trol.
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
as possible.
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Winter Operation
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucperiods, as fogging may occur.
tions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . . .430
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .425 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .430
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .426 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .431
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
(Below –20°F or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .437
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵
䡵
䡵
䡵
䡵
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(1.4L Turbo Engine Only — DDCT) . . . . . . . . .438
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
(2.0L And 2.4L Engine Only — 6F24) . . . . . . . .448
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . .
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . .
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .
DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . .
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . .
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . .
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
. . . .464
. . . .465
. . . .465
. . . .465
. . . .465
. . . .467
. . . .468
. . . .468
. . . .471
. . . .472
. . . .476
. . . .477
. . . .478
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .485 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .501
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .489 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .503
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .492
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . .
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
. . . . .504
. . . . .507
. . . . .509
. . . . .512
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .515
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .521
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .537
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
(Continued)
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the gear
selector in NEUTRAL.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is
locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
key.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in
the passenger compartment.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Normal Starting
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
out of PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the EVIC/DID will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in Neutral, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
OFF position.
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC/DID will
display “OFF”).
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions
an externally powered electric block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L
Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine
below -29°F (-34°C) and is recommended for the 2.0L
engine and 2.4L engine below -20°F (-29°C).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC/DID will Extended Park Starting
display “ACC”).
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC/DID
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
will display “ON/RUN”).
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it If Engine Fails To Start
when the engine starts.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the ⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure,
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five and has not experienced an extended park condition as
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the identified in ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedure it may
be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
the procedure.
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
After Starting
The engine block heater is required for 1.4L Turbo engine
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine below -29°F
warms up.
(-34°C). It is recommended for the 2.0L engine and 2.4L
engine below -20°F (-29°C).
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
WARNING!
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
warms up. This is normal.
speeds may not apply.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
All Engines
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Accel.
24 (39)
34 (55)
47 (76)
Cruise
19 (31)
27 (43)
37 (60)
Downshifting
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
CAUTION!
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear
and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
(Continued)
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
Gear Selection
Maximum
Speed
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)
2 to 1
15 (24)
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine off, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
Key Fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transKey Ignition Park Interlock
mission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park InterON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
pedal must be pressed.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear shifting between these gears.
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
button on the gear selector to move the gear selector out from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
System” in this section). To drive, press the lock button feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
on the front of the gear selector and move the gear
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (1.4L Turbo
Engine Only — DDCT)
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector rearward (+) or
forward (-) while in the AutoStick position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
5
Gear Selector
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterisUse this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged tics under all normal operating conditions.
periods with the engine running. The engine may be To maximize fuel economy, the Dual Dry Clutch transstarted in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift mission uses a geartrain arrangement similar to a manual
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. transmission. Therefore, you should become familiar
with some of the normal operational characteristics of
WARNING!
this transmission:
NEUTRAL (N)
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
• During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This
behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission.
• At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes
This range should be used for most city and highway
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downthe transmission.
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE (D)
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
warning message will display in the Instrument Cluster if cool down actions are needed.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information) to
• When stopped on an incline, always use the brakes to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
hold the vehicle in place. On steep inclines, Hill Start
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator
pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission
back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or will not operate if the oil temperature is -22°F (-30°C) or
press the accelerator to climb the hill.
below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmission in PARK in order to warm the fluid. Normal
• Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise
has risen to a suitable level.
is normal and will not damage the transmission.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Instrument Cluster Messages
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
These messages are described below.
MESSAGE
GEAR NOT AVAILABLE
SHIFT NOT ALLOWED
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL –
THEN D or R
DESCRIPTION
In AutoStick mode, the gear selected by the driver is not available due to a fault
condition. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked. This occurs if: REVERSE is requested while moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), if DRIVE is requested while moving backwards (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), or if (in AutoStick
mode) a DOWNSHIFT is requested while in 1st gear, 3rd gear or higher is requested
at a stop, or a requested shift would cause engine lugging or overspeed. Make sure
the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE.
The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL (due to a fault condition, or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes released), but the
gear selector remains in gear. Shift into NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued driving. If the transmission will not re-engage, see your authorized dealer.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
MESSAGE
AUTOSTICK NOT
AVAILABLE
AUTOMATIC MODE NOT
AVAILABLE
REDUCE GEAR CHANGES
TRANS. GETTING HOT
PRESS BRAKE
TRANS. HOT STOP
SAFELY SHIFT TO P
DESCRIPTION
AutoStick mode is unavailable due to a gear selector fault. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically, due to a fault condition.
Use the AutoStick mode to shift the transmission manually. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick mode, try to drive in one
specific gear as much as possible, avoiding frequent gear changes. In DRIVE, the
transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule to reduce the number
of shifts.
The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usually due to repeated launches
in stop-and-go traffic. Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL
until “TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed.
The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull over, shift the transmission
into PARK, and allow the vehicle to cool until “TRANS. COOL READY TO
DRIVE” is displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
MESSAGE
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
SERVICE SHIFTER
ENGAGE PARK BRAKE
DESCRIPTION
A transmission fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis
and service.
A gear selector fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis
and service.
The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly. Engage
the parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK.
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
damaging the transmission.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a following steps:
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
1. Stop the vehicle.
Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
button on the gear selector to move the gear selector out
of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
5. Restart the engine.
System” in this section). To drive, push the lock button on
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the front of the gear selector and move the gear selector
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
operation.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
service is required.
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
2.4L Engine Only — 6F24)
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear position display (located in the The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector rearward (+) or
forward (-) while in the AutoStick position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for- motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position vehicle in this range.
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transinstrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right mission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE- When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Gear Ranges
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that NEUTRAL (N)
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiUse this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
tion:
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
gear selector and firmly move the lever all the way the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
DRIVE (D)
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
This range should be used for most city and highway
stop.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv- transmission may operate differently until the transmising characteristics under all normal operating conditions. sion cools down.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission
During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),
transmission operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomdriven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
aging the transmission.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Overdrive Operation
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
ditions are present:
5. Restart the engine.
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera- NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is
ture.
inhibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
converter clutch will function normally once the transTorque Converter Clutch
mission is sufficiently warm.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. AUTOSTICK
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly providing manual shift control, giving you more control
different feeling or response during normal operation in of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
and many other situations.
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
reached. The transmission will upshift only when
commanded by the driver. Engine overspeed protection is provided by the engine controls.
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward
and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
selector forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+)
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instruvehicle is accelerated.
ment cluster. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will
• With 2.0L or 2.4L engine, you can start out, from a stop,
only shift up or down when the driver moves the gear
in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine
allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second
lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• For all models except GT, the transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
over-speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
• For GT models, the transmission will remain in the
AutoStick is engaged.
selected gear even when maximum engine speed is
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and
Acceleration
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip• If the system detects a problem, it will disable pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the front (driving) wheels.
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
WARNING!
off the accelerator pedal.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
WARNING!
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
personal injury.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
PARKING BRAKE
Parking Brake
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
The
parking
brake
lever
is located in the center console.
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
To
apply
the
parking
brake,
pull the lever up as firmly as
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
possible.
To
release
the
parking
brake, pull the lever up
in REVERSE or first gear.
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the
parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
(Continued)
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal
travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system,
the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on as the brake fluid
level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
front axle.
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake Brake System Warning Light
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
stay on for as long as four seconds.
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
tions.
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
Your vehicle may also equipped with Trailer Sway Con- required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
trol (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Sup- come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
port (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This function manages the distribution of the braking The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
WARNING!
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipclicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ment that may be susceptible to interference
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
caused by improperly installed or high output
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capaor panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activability. Installation of such equipment should be
tion(s).
performed by qualified professionals.
You also may experience the following when ABS acti- • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
vates:
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
short time after the stop).
slow down or stop.
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi- Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
repaired as soon as possible.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
WARNING!
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, inreduce braking distances. The BAS complements the cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroquickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure the safety of others.
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
WARNING! (Continued)
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruadditional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform
back to the ON position. If the sequence was comthe following steps:
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Traction Control System (TCS)
3. Apply the parking brake.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
4. Start the engine.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
turn to the left.
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differenbank below the climate control four times within tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
turn on and turn off two times.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” loThis system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
(Continued)
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On
will turn off.
ESC Operating Modes
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the “ESC off”
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
Partial Off
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
that caused the ESC activation.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance steering wheel.
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind- realize the correct course of action through small torques
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
no driver interaction is required.
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
650 lbs [294 kg]).
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
the weight referenced here.
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
capacity calculated in step 4.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu- NOTE:
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• For the following example, the combined weight of
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
At least once a month:
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
Snow Tires
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires tire inflation pressures.
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
CAUTION!
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
Damage to the vehicle may result.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor- Wheel — If Equipped
mation.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
tire rotation pattern.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
WARNING!
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
80D18 103M.
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susthis manual for more information relating to the Load
pension dimensions and performance characterisIndex and Speed Symbol of a tire.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
(Continued)
Replacement Tires
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
• Install on Front Tires
• Due to limited clearance,
• For a 205/55R16 the 12 mm Diamond Tire Chain with
Ratchet Tensioning Device from tirechain.com is recommended.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
• For a 225/45R17 either the Peerless Auto-Trac or Thule
CG-9 snow chain is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
Tire Rotation
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
natural pressure loss through the tire.
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
“cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warnthree hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
5
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
(Continued)
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Base System
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumiThis is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
nate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE PRESSURE⬙
instrument cluster.
message and “Inflate Tire to XX” message will be disThe TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim played for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev- chime will be activated when one or more of the four
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
Module.
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly value. The recommended cold placard pressure value is
the pressure value in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message
and to maintain the proper pressure.
displayed in the EVIC/DID. The system will automatiThe TPMS consists of the following components:
cally update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish and the ⬙LOW TIRE PRESSURE⬙ and “Inflate
• Receiver Module.
Tire to XX” messages will turn off once the updated tire
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
receive this information.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warnings
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime and display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
and ⬙LOW TIRE PRESSURE⬙ and “Inflate Tire to XX”
TPM sensors.
messages will still turn ON due to the low tire.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minthat affects radio wave signals.
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
seconds and then remain on solid and a “SERVICE Premium System — If Equipped
TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a mini- The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mum of five seconds.
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on module.
solid and a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
displayed for a minimum of five seconds.
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the “Inflate Tire to XX” message will no longer be
displayed, the graphic display of the pressure value(s)
will return to their normal color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
to receive this information.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “Inflate Tire to
XX” message for a minimum of five seconds and a
graphic of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
displayed in a different color. The recommended cold Service TPMS Message
placard pressure inflation value is the pressure value
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
displayed in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message displayed in
and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid when a
the EVIC/DID.
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four a chime. The EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
and inflate all tires that are in a different color on the text message is then followed by a graphic display, with
“- -“ in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which
Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warndisplayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
with any of the following scenarios:
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “Inflate Tire
to XX” message and the graphic with the low tire
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
pressure in a different color will be displayed.
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minthat affects radio wave signals.
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, the EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
values.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
eration.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as by the party responsible for compliance could void the
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure user’s authority to operate the equipment.
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo Engine
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory 2.0L And 2.4L Engine
fuel economy and performance when usThis engine is designed to meet all emising high-quality unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gasosions regulations and provide optimum
line having an octane rating of 87 using the
fuel economy and performance when us(R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance and fuel
ing high quality unleaded “Regular” gasoeconomy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended.
line having a posted octane number of 87
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immeengines.
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxythan 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be genates such as ethanol.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop- Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im- than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Warranty.
• Operate in a lean mode.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel • Poor engine performance.
system components. Problems that result from running
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim- blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
ited Warranty.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Materials Added To Fuel
Fuel System Cautions
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
CAUTION! (Continued)
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap
has been designed for use with this vehicle.
1. Place the vehicle in PARK (P) position and switch the
Push To Open
ignition LOCK/OFF.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap (gas cap) and hang by tether
hook on fuel filler door.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
release to open.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
5
Fuel Filler Door
1— Tether Hook
Fuel Filler Door And Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1— Tether Hook
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door around the entire perimeter to break the ice
buildup and re-open the door.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
6. Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge
of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel door
will close.
Push To Close
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(Continued)
NOTE: If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
Vehicle Certification Label
GVWR.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
Tire Size
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Rim Size
Overloading
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
listed.
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
Curb Weight
it is not over the GVWR.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
operate.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
TRAILER TOWING
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
In this section you will find safety tips and information exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully further information.
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
information.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
WARNING!
ready for operation⬙ condition.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear Frontal Area
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front maximum width of the front of a trailer.
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control and thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds, contributing positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on Vehicle and Trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The following chart provides the industry standard for
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable Ratings)
for your given drivetrain.
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
1.4L Turbo Engine
Max. Trailer Hitch
Class
Industry Standards
Trailer towing is not recommended.
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
150 lbs (50 kg)
2.0L and 2.4L Auto/Man
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Consider the following items when computing the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
train components, the following guidelines are recom- information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended:
Towing Requirements
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Always
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
sures before trailer usage.
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor2,000 lbs (907 kg).
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perforBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesand backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
traffic.
provide better engine braking.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, minutes of continuous operation, then change the transall starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch mission fluid and filter as specified for severe usage
slippage.
(police, fleet, taxi, or frequent trailer towing). Refer to the
⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper maintenance inAutomatic Transmission — If Equipped
tervals.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the AutoStick
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear. When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest
gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids
frequent downshifts. For example, choose ⬙4⬙ if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose ⬙3⬙ or ⬙2⬙ if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
Towing Tips
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Manual
Transmission
Flat Tow
None
Dolly Tow
Front
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
1.4L Turbo Engine
With Automatic
Transmission
(DDCT)
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
All
OK
OK
Towing Condition
On Trailer
2.0L/2.4L Engine
With Automatic
Transmission
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any 2.0L or 2.4L engine vehicle
equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage
to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all the wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .541 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .541
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .544
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .548 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
6
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ 2.0L / 2.4L Automatic Transmission. . . . . . . . .575
▫ Manual Transmission Or 1.4L Turbo Automatic
(DDCT) Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
center of the instrument panel.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
2 — Deflation Button
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a 3 — Pressure Gauge
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
4 — Power Button
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
Selecting Sealant Mode
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
6
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw • After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
nails) from the tire.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Service Kit.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
6
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the DeflaHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recompsi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle (D) Drive Vehicle:
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive VeImmediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
hicle.”
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
6
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
opening.
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
Volt outlet.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
the vehicle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
of it accordingly.
service center.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
housing.
panel after the tire has been repaired.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
ment”.
bottle is locked into place.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
6
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
WARNING! (Continued)
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
6
Pull Strap
Fastener Location
NOTE: Lift and remove foam insert before removing jack 4. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
and spare tire.
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
the wrench from the jack assembly.
5. Remove the spare tire.
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
block the left rear wheel.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Preparations For Jacking
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
6
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
Jacking Locations
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to
firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the
sill flange, centering the jack saddle between the
locating notches on the sill flange.
6
Front Jacking Location
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
6
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
WARNING!
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased hard stop could endanger the occupants of the veleverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper repaired or replaced immediately.
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight- Road Tire Installation
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
assembly using the means provided. Release the
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
parking brake before driving the vehicle.
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
12. Stow the jack and tools in the storage location and
secure the flat tire in the trunk.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Bolt
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Road Wheel
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park- 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
handle counterclockwise.
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
properly seated against the wheel.
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the precautions.
assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
CAUTION!
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
6
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
spected at your authorized dealer.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd Gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission) while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For 1.4L Turbo automatic (DDCT) transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or less.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “partial off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
3. Remove the rubber storage tray liner from the center 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
console, then lift up the front of the gear selector bezel,
the access slot at the front of the gear selector assemcarefully disengage the bezel from the gear selector
bly, and push and hold the white override release
housing, and slide it up to the top of the gear selector.
lever down.
6
Gear Selector Bezel
Override Release Tab
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Gear Selector
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector bezel (use care to avoid
pinching the wiring), and the rubber storage tray liner.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
2.0L / 2.4L
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear
Front
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Flatbed
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
1.4L TURBO AUTOMATIC (DDCT)
TRANSMISSION
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on
the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
6
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
Front Of Vehicle Recovery Points
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
• DO NOT flat tow any 2.0L or 2.4L vehicle equipped
with an automatic transmission. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all the wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2.0L / 2.4L Automatic Transmission
This vehicle must be towed with all four wheels OFF
the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for loading onto a flatbed truck.
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Manual Transmission Or 1.4L Turbo Automatic
(DDCT) Transmission
• The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
• Manual transmission and 1.4L turbo automatic
(DDCT) transmission vehicles can also be flat towed
(all four wheels on the ground) with the transmission
in NEUTRAL. For vehicles with DDCT transmission
(1.4L turbo automatic), refer to ⬙Gear Selector Override⬙ in this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission into NEUTRAL when the ignition is OFF.
If the ignition is left in the ACC position, it may be
helpful to disconnect the negative battery cable (and
secure it away from the battery post), to avoid draining
the battery.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition
is related to the clutch, transmission or driveline.
Additional damage to the drivetrain could result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine, transmission,
or drivetrain damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .579 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . .580 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .586
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .582
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .583
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .608
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .610
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
7
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Level Indicator
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
5
6
7
8
— Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Air Cleaner Filter
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Engine Oil Level Indicator
— Air Cleaner Filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Engine Oil Level Indicator
— Air Cleaner Filter
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Push the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. following:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
check.
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your DEALER SERVICE
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range. Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil
level at the full end of the indicator range.
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L And 2.4L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The Identification Symbol
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
This symbol means that the oil has
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12991.
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo
Engine
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L And 2.4L
Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also
states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for
your engine.
MOPAR SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil approved to
FCA Material Standard MS-12991 such as Pennzoil, Shell
Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certiThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on ber should not be used.
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Materials Added To Engine Oil
ment” in this section.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
tives.
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Engine Air Cleaner Filter
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainteindiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service intervals.
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
WARNING!
your area.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
Engine Oil Filter
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
at every engine oil change.
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
Engine Oil Filter Selection
near the engine compartment before starting the
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
(Continued)
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Tires
Checking For Tire Wear
Once a month, check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
(Continued)
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
Passenger Side Console Closeout
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the 2. Disengage the retaining tab that secures the filter
lower right of center console. Perform the following
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout. (located
on the right side of the center console).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
7
Filter Cover Retaining Tab
Air Conditioning Filter Removal
3. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 4. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicaindicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
tors.
When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tab fully engages the cover.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
5. Install the passenger side console closeout.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
oil, or refrigerants.
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
containers.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
WARNING!
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
sary.
the washer solution.
Adding Washer Fluid
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentraneeded to be added to the system, please contact your
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
local authorized dealer.
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
possible.
NOTE:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
with your local authorities to determine the disposal maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporprotection of your engine which contains aluminum
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) Brake Master Cylinder
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis- The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
sions.
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality, and will require more
frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for
fluid specifications.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using Fluid Level Check
any special additives in the transmission.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule. In addition, change the fluid (and filter, if equipped) if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
The transmission is designed to be fill for life. The oil
does not need to be checked unless there is an oil leak.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
Should the transmission be leaking oil, the transmission
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
should be serviced to correct the condition.
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for
frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the
Fluid and Filter Changes
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
underbody protection.
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri- The following maintenance recommendations will enable
cant has become contaminated with water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
What Causes Corrosion?
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
the owner.
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, nently damage this finish and such damage is not covde-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
packaged and sealed.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
7
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
(Continued)
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manUse MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
ner:
carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
leather upholstery.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivaYour leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
lent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
scratch the elements.
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
Instrument Panel Cover
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
lowed by rinsing.
protectants or other products which may cause undesirDo not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
low glare surface.
Glass Surfaces
Cleaning Headlights
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
WARNING!
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth or micro-fiber towel. A
mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
(Continued)
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
(Continued)
Interior Fuses
The interior fuses are located on the drivers side under
the instrument panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Cavity
F1
F2
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
F3
–
10 Amp Red
F4
F5
–
–
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F18
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
Description
Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats, Heated Steering Wheel – If
Equipped
Park Assist Module, Rear Camera, Left and
Right Blind Spot Sensor, Compass – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster
HVAC, Humidity Sensor, In-Vehicle Temperature
Sensor, Inside Mirror Assembly
Radio
Steering Column Control Module, Switch Bank
Diagnostic Port
Universal Garage Door Opener, EOM
Sunroof
Run/Accessory Relay
Transmission Control Module #4
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F26
F27
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini Fuse
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
Description
Stop Lamp Switch
Pneumatic Lumbar Support
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located on the right side
of the engine compartment, behind the battery. This
center contains maxi fuses, mini fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers. The cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Cavity
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F09
F10
F11
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
Maxi Fuse
70 Amp Tan
60 Amp Blue
30 Amp Green
40 Amp Orange
40 Amp Orange
30 Amp Green
40 Amp Orange
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Body Control Module #1
Body Control Module #2
Output For Starter Relay #1
ESC Pump Motor
Transmission Control Module #1
Body Control Module #3
EBL RLY Coil, Blower Motor RLY Coil
Radiator Fan
ORC
Run/Start, Engine Control Module
Transmission Control Module #2
Transmission Control Module #3
Engine Control Module, Ignition Coils
Brake System Module
Engine Control Module
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F30
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
Maxi Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
60 Amp Blue
30 Amp Green
40 Amp Orange
–
–
Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F86
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
A/C Compressor Clutch
Rear Defroster (EBL)
Fuel Pump
Occupant Restraint Controller
Brake System Module
Engine Control Module, Fuel Injectors
Power Outlet (Console)
Interior PDC Battery Feed, Power Seats
Amplifier
HVAC Blower Motor
Cigar Lighter
Sunroof, LRSM, Power Outlet (Console),
UCI/AUX Port, Cigar Lighter
–
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Cavity
F87
Maxi Fuse
–
Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
F88
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Wastegate, Purge Solenoid, OBD Vent Valve,
Oxygen Sensor Heaters
Heated Outside Mirrors
Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses
Cavity
F12
F13
F31
F32
F33
F34
F36
F37
F38
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
15 Amp Blue
–
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Spare
Left Headlamp
Spare
Interior Lighting/Decklid/Liftgate Release
Window Motor – Driver
Window Motor – Passenger
Intrusion Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Door Locks
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F42
F43
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F53
F89
F90
F91
F92
F93
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
15 Amp Blue
Description
Spare
Windshield Washer Pump
Transmission Control Module (Tcm)
Spare
Stop Lamp Switch
Pneumatic Lumbar Support
Cd/Hands-Free Module – Bluetooth/Radio Display
Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors
Trunk Lamp
Front Fog Lamps – Right
Front Fog Lamps – Left
High Beams (Shutters)
Right Headlamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
VEHICLE STORAGE
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informaservice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the tion.
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
7
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Dome Lamp
Overhead Console Lamp
Bulb Number
W5W
W5W
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Bulb Number
9005HL+
D3S **
7442NALL
194
H11
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
7440
168
* Lamp is not serviceable. It is a LED lamp. To replace the this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
LED, the entire assembly must be replaced.
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
** The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge
tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
Headlamps
Halogen Headlamps
Can be serviced by removing the cap from the backside
of the headlamp. Remove the HIR2 bulb from the connector and replacing the bulb. Reinstall bulb and cap.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Lamps
1. Open trunk.
2. Remove trim cover.
Bulb Socket
4. Replace bulb.
Trim Cover
3. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
5. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn clockwise to
install.
6. Install trim cover.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
7
Backup Bulb
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
install the replacement bulb.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
Fuel (1.4L Engines)
13.2 Gallons
Fuel (2.0L/2.4L Engines)
14.2 Gallons
Fuel (2.4L GT models only)
15.8 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified)
4 Quarts
2.0L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5 Quarts
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
Cooling System*
1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR OAT Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
5.8 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR OAT Antifreeze/Engine Cool7.2 Quarts
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and pressurized coolant bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
50 Liters
54 Liters
60 Liters
3.8 Liters
4.7 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.5 Liters
6.8 Liters
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Engine Oil – 2.0L and 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991 such as
MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.0L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.0L Flex Fuel (E85)
Engine – If Equipped
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission (1.4L
Turbo Engine) – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine) – If Equipped
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Gearbox: Use only MOPAR C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Control System: Use only MOPAR C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydraulic
Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Use only MOPAR SP-IV M Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Required Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
8
638 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
further information.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
concern for fleet customers
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed. Severe Duty All Models
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator Duty.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 639
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change engine oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
640 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
X
X
12
150,000
64,000
X
11
13
14
15
240,000
48,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect CV joint boots.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and replace as
necessary.
Inspect brake linings, parking brake function.
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley,
and replace if necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
10
140,000
9
224,000
90,000
8
130,000
80,000
7
208,000
70,000
6
120,000
60,000
5
192,000
50,000
4
110,000
40,000
3
176,000
30,000
2
100,000
20,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
160,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
X
X
12
X
150,000
64,000
X
11
13
14
15
240,000
48,000
Replace the spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine).**
Replace the spark plugs (2.0L and 2.4L Engine).**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change the transmission fluid (manual, or 1.4L turbo automatic) if using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during
hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
10
140,000
9
224,000
90,000
8
130,000
80,000
7
208,000
70,000
6
120,000
60,000
5
192,000
50,000
4
110,000
40,000
3
176,000
30,000
2
100,000
20,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
160,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 641
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
X
12
150,000
64,000
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
11
13
14
15
240,000
48,000
Change the automatic transmission fluid (2.0L, 2.4L engines only) if you frequently drive: on rough or unpaved
roads, on mountain roads, on short trips, in heavy city
traffic during hot weather, or while towing a trailer, or if
you use the vehicle for police, taxi, or in a commercial
fleet.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine).
10
140,000
9
224,000
90,000
8
130,000
80,000
7
208,000
70,000
6
120,000
60,000
5
192,000
50,000
4
110,000
40,000
3
176,000
30,000
2
100,000
20,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
160,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
32,000
642 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 643
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .648
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .649
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .652
9
646 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 647
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
648 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423-6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 649
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
650 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 651
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
9
652 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Canada
Service Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 653
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
9
654 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
Traction Grades
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 655
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
658 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 66
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 67
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 87
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 66, 70
Front Passenger Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 113, 313
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .590
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418, 594
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592, 593
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .404, 415, 592
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
INDEX 659
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 316
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . .601, 631, 632
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .415
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 608
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608, 635
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 449
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 591
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .29
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
10
660 INDEX
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .631, 632
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580, 581, 589
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 517
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 360
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .584
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . .191
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone . .172
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463, 606
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 627
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 625
INDEX 661
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .104
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .97
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .93
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Compact Disc (CD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .394
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631, 632
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .603
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600, 604
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
10
662 INDEX
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.605
.603
.603
.601
.611
.333
.290
.647
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 407
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .38
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 35
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 37
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 37
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
INDEX 663
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .253
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .320
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .270, 335
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .584
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580, 581
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 517
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587, 631, 632
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580, 581, 589
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
10
664 INDEX
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588, 632
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 517
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 598
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418, 594
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 242, 332
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632, 635
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .632
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
INDEX 665
Clean Air . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Specifications . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.514
.514
.518
.513
.329
.516
.514
.513
.513
.632
.631
.618
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .274, 281
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 583
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 631, 632
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432, 440, 449
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 203, 512
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 524
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .243
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 249
10
666 INDEX
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Courtesy Overhead Console
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter . . . . . . .24
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305, 317, 332
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
. . .526 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .247
. . .293 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . .274 iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . .175, 207, 400
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.243
.237
.238
.228
.126
.404
.430
.243
.468
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.12 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
.24 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
.24 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 557
.24
INDEX 667
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 37
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .29
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 426
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 40
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 37, 40
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 40
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . .27, 40
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 625
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 237
10
668 INDEX
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 113, 313
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .242, 243
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 249
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .322
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .246
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243, 273
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 242, 332
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .317, 332
INDEX 669
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 523
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .322, 584
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 610
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Frequency Of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585, 651
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
10
670 INDEX
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 360
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 360
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587, 631, 632
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588, 631, 632
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 652
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
INDEX 671
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .486
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .286
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .603
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 21, 31, 35, 45
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
10
672 INDEX
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .29
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .401
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
INDEX 673
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .60
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 55, 57
Seat Belt
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .60
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .63
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222, 227
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222, 224
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 232
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 113 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
10
674 INDEX
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Shifting
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 242, 332
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495, 496, 497, 554
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 425
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
INDEX 675
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .401
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .66
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.251
.415
.164
.251
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .485, 486
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Tire Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 489, 495, 653
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 557
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 495
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 556, 557
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
10
676 INDEX
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479, 489
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495, 496, 497, 554
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . .544, 545, 548, 549, 551, 552, 553
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .537
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457, 458
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 608
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .29
INDEX 677
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .274
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .29 Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .25
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Uconnect Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 171, 172
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 51
Currently In Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Bluetooth Communication Link . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name . . . . . . . . . .182
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242, 332
Call Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Call Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Cancel Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Uconnect
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . .154, 191
Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . .191
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 186
Far End Audio Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Join Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28
10
678 INDEX
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Natural Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Toggling Between Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone . . . . . .191
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 38
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .394
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486, 522, 523
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 625
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .325
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
INDEX 679
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 285
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 407
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16JC49-126-AA
16PFD41-126-AC
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
First
ThirdEdition
Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement